User manual

ManualsBrandsOLYMPUS ManualsPhoto & VideoDigital camera TG-4 16 MPix Optical zoom: 4 x Red Battery Shockproof, Dustproof, Splashproof, Frost-resistant

ﺓءﺍﺮﻗ ﻰﺟﺮ

ﻳ ،ﺓﺪﻳﺪﺠﻟﺍ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ءﺪﺑ ﻞﺒﻗ .ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺮﻟﺍ Olympus ﺕﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻛ ﻯﺪﺣﺇ ﻚﺋﺍﺮﺸﻟ ﺍ

ﺮﻜﺷ

ﻪﻴﻟﺇ ﻉﻮﺟﺮﻠﻟ ﻦﻣﺁ ﻥﺎﻜﻣ ﻲﻓ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻬﺑ ﻆﻔﺘﺣﺍ .ﻝﻮﻃﺃ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﺓﺮﺘﻓﻭ ﻞﺜﻣﺃ ءﺍﺩﺄﺑ ﻊﺘﻤﺘﺴﺗ ﻲﻛ ﺔﻳﺎﻨﻌﺑ ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻠﻌﺘﻟﺍ

.ﺪﻌﺑ ﺎﻤﻴﻓ

ﺔﻴﻓﺍﺮﻏﻮﺗﻮﻔﻟﺍ ﺭﻮﺼﻟﺍ ﻁﺎﻘﺘﻟﺍ ﻞﺒﻗ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ ﻡﺍﺪﺨﺘﺳﺍ ﻰﻠﻋ ﺩﺎﺘﻌﺗ ﻲﻛ ﺔﻴﺒﻳﺮﺠﺗ ﺮﻳﻮﺼﺗ ﺕﺎﻄﻘﻟ ﺬﻴﻔﻨﺘﺑ ﺎ

ﻀﻳﺃ ﻲﺻﻮﻧ

.ﺔﻣﺎﻬﻟﺍ

ﺪﻗﻭ ﺮﻳﻮﻄﺘﻟﺍ ﻞﺣﺍﺮﻣ ءﺎﻨﺛﺃ ﻞﻴﻟﺪﻟﺍ ﺍﺬﻫ ﻲﻓ ﺓﺩﺭﺍﻮﻟﺍ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍﻭ ﺔﺷﺎﺸﻟﺎﺑ ﺔﺻﺎﺨﻟﺍ ﺔﻴﺤﻴﺿﻮﺘﻟﺍ ﻡﻮﺳﺮﻟﺍ ﺭﺍﺪﺻﺇ ﻢﺗ

.ﻲﻘﻴﻘﺤﻟﺍ ﺞﺘﻨﻤﻟﺍ ﻦﻋ ﻒﻠﺘﺨﺗ

ﺕﺎﻤﻴﻠﻌﺘﻟﺍ ﻞﻴﻟﺩ

ﺔﻴﻤﻗﺮﻟﺍ ﺍﺮﻴﻣﺎﻜﻟﺍ

TG-4

Summary of content (116 pages)

PAGE 1
‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪TG-4‬‬ ‫ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺷﻜﺮﺍ ﻟﺸﺮﺍﺋﻚ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ‪ Olympus‬ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﻗﺮﺍءﺓ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﺴﺘﻤﺘﻊ ﺑﺄﺩﺍء ﺃﻣﺜﻞ ﻭﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻃﻮﻝ‪ .‬ﺍﺣﺘﻔﻆ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺁﻣﻦ ﻟﻠﺮﺟﻮﻉ ﺇﻟﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻤﺎ ﺑﻌﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺻﻲ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﻟﻘﻄﺎﺕ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺠﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ ﻛﻲ ﺗﻌﺘﺎﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺇﺻﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺿﻴﺤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺭﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻣﺮﺍﺣﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﻗﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺤﻘﻴﻘﻲ‪.
PAGE 2
‫ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺪﻭﻕ‬ ‫ﺗﺄﺗﻲ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻣﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺜﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻱ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﻔﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﻮﺯﻉ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﺍﺷﺘﺮﻳﺖ ﻣﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﻠﻴﺜﻴﻮﻡ ﺃﻳﻮﻥ‬ ‫)‪(LI-92B‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪OLYMPUS‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪(F-2AC) USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ‪ :‬ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺗﺒﻌًﺎ ﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺣﺰﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪AR 2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺤﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺸﺪﺓ ﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺇﺣﻜﺎﻣﻪ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.
PAGE 3
‫ﺃﺳﻤﺎء ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪0‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫‪e‬‬ ‫‪f‬‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ‪LOCK‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﻤﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‪/‬ﻣﺆﺷﺮ ‪/LED‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻣﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺳﺘﺮﻳﻮ‬ ‫ﻫﻮﺍﺋﻲ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪n‬‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‬ ‫ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪) INFO‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺷﺪ ‪ HIGF‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻷﻋﻠﻰ‪/‬ﻷﺳﻔﻞ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﺴﺎﺭ‪/‬ﻟﻠﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 4
‫ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻀﻴﺮ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺍﺕ ‪ 2 ،1‬ﻭ ‪ 3‬ﻟﻔﺘﺢ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﻃﻔﺊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻓﺘﺢ‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ‪LOCK‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﺗﺰﻟﻖ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪AR 4‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺿﺢ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺠﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪ C‬ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﻘﺒﺾ‬ ‫ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 5
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ﻟﻠﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻠﻤﺲ ﺍﻷﺟﺰﺍء ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺩﻭﻣًﺎ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺃﻱ ﺃﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻼﻣﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪) SD/SDHC/SDXC/Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺰﻭﺩﺓ ﺑﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺷﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ(‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮﺓ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳًﺎ( )ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺰﻳﺎﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪(.
PAGE 6
‫ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫‪.USB‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء‪ .‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﻨﻄﻔﺊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ )ﻷﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪ 5‬ﺳﺎﻋﺎﺕ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﻣﺆﺷﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ :‬ﺷﺤﻦ‬ ‫ﻏﻠﻖ‪ :‬ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻭ‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫)ﻣﺮﻓﻖ(‬ ‫ﻏﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻟﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺣﻦ ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺝ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 7
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﻀﺊ ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪ ،‬ﻓﺄﻋﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ "ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ" ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ[ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) [USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (58‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻴﻤﻴﻦ‪.
PAGE 8
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻷﻭﻝ ﻣﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺘﻴﺢ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﻟﻠﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﻈﺮ "ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪) "[X] d‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(60‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ n‬ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ HIGF‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺘﻚ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ‪ ،‬ﻟﻦ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ، n‬ﻓﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 9
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(P‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ n‬ﻹﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.P‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪ ،P‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ‬ ‫ﻭﻓﺘﺤﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺳﺘﺠﺎﺑﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺔ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﻊ ً‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺮﺹ ﻟﺌﻼ ﺗﻐﻄﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻓﻮﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﺟﺰﺍء ﻣﻬﻤﺔ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﺄﺻﺎﺑﻌﻚ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.
PAGE 10
‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ )ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ(‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.q‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﺣﺪﺙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﺃﻭ ﺍﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‬ ‫‪4/30‬‬ ‫‪’15/02/26 12:30‬‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ‬ ‫ﺯﺭ ‪q‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ‪ W‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻔﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HIGF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﺘﺤﺮﻳﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.
PAGE 11
‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪) R‬ﻓﻴﻠﻢ( ﻟﺒﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﻠﻢ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺮﺟﻰ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺾ ﻣﺆﺛﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪ ،CMOS‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻷﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻣﺸﻮﻫﺔ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﻟﻈﺎﻫﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ‪ .‬ﺗﻠﻚ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﺰﻳﺎﺋﻴﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺘﻬﺎ ﻳﺤﺪﺙ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻮﻩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻳﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺑﺴﺮﻋﺔ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﻧﺘﻴﺠﺔ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .
PAGE 12
‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫‪4/30‬‬ ‫‪’15/02/26 12:30‬‬ ‫‪00:12/00:34‬‬ ‫‪ϭϳΩϳϓ ϝϳϐηΗ OK‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ ﻭﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﺟﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ .‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻹﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻌﻮﺩﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﻹﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) I‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪ .‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) I‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺪﻳﻢ ﺍﻟﺴﺮﻳﻊ‪.
PAGE 13
‫ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﻤﺴﺢ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻓﻴﻠﻤًﺎ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ωϮΟέ MENU‬‬ ‫‪΢δϣ‬‬ ‫‪4/30‬‬ ‫‪΢δϣ‬‬ ‫‪˯Ύϐϟ΍‬‬ ‫‪100-0004‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) GF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤُﺠﻤﻌﺔ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(54‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 14
‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﻭﺻﻮﺭ ﻣُﺠﻤﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﺐ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺣﺪﺓ ﻣﻌﺎً ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﺍﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ[ ﺃﻭ ]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪4/30‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫‪’15/02/26 12:30‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺈﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﻣﺆﻗﺖ‪ :‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻮﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) HIGF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ‪/‬ﺗﺼﻐﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 15
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣُﺠﻤﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ )‪) (d/c/j‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (32‬ﻭ ]‪ p‬ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ[ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (23‬ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪) k‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺮ(‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻛﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺎﻧﺐ ‪T‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﺳﻌﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺬﻑ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺠﻤﻌﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻮﺳﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻭﺣﺬﻑ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻓﺮﺩﻱ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺴﺎﺑﻖ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻲ‪.
PAGE 16
‫ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﻭﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫‪5 6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪1 2 3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪SCN‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪WB‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪880hPa 1200m‬‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫‪4:3‬‬ ‫‪0:00:34‬‬ ‫‪G‬‬ ‫‪Date n‬‬ ‫‪4 NORM‬‬ ‫‪24 2322 21 2019 18 17 1615‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪1/100 F6.
PAGE 17
‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪10‬‬ ‫‪11‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﻢ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪o/Y‬‬ ‫‪13‬‬ ‫‪14‬‬ ‫‪15‬‬ ‫‪16‬‬ ‫‪17‬‬ ‫‪18‬‬ ‫‪19‬‬ ‫‪20‬‬ ‫‪21‬‬ ‫‪22‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪24‬‬ ‫‪25‬‬ ‫‪26‬‬ ‫‪27‬‬ ‫‪28‬‬ ‫‪29‬‬ ‫‪30‬‬ ‫‪31‬‬ ‫‪32‬‬ ‫‪33‬‬ ‫‪34‬‬ ‫‪35‬‬ ‫‪36‬‬ ‫‪37‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ‪ /‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍ
PAGE 18
‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ 2345 6 7 RAW ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ • ‫ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‬ • 8 9 4/30 10 ’15/02/26 12:30 27 26 ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ 1 2 3 45 6 12 8 9 10 7 10 RAW 11 4/30 880hpa 1200m P 1/1000 F3.9 NORM ISO 100 2.0 WB AUTO 4608 3456 100-0004 ’15/02/26 12:30 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 880hpa 1200m P 1/1000 F3.9 NORM ISO 100 2.
PAGE 19
‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﻭﺽ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﺗﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ ← ﻣُﻔﺼﻞ ← ﺑﻼ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 20
‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻷﺳﺎﺳﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﺷﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ^ ﺃﻭ ‪ O‬ﺃﻭ ‪ ،k‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 21
‫‪) A‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ‪(iAUTO‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻟﻪ ﺑﺘﺤﺴﻴﻦ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺠﻌﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﺔ ﻟﻠﻤﺒﺘﺪﺋﻴﻦ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻭﻣﻀﺖ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺑﺎﻷﺣﻤﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.
PAGE 22
‫^ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء(‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺈﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫] ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﻣﺎﺋﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺎﻃﺊ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ ﻭﺣﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺎﺣﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫\ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫[ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﻮﺍﻟﻲ ‪ 5‬ﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ w‬ﻣﺎﻛﺮﻭ ﻣﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻣﻘﺮﺏ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.
PAGE 23
‫‪) k‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺮ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ .‬ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻌﻤﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺎﻝ ﻛﺒﻴﺮ‪ ،‬ﻭﺇﺟﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﻟﻌﺪﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.k‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪ m‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺮ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1‬ﺳﻢ ﺑﻌﻴ ًﺪﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.
PAGE 24
‫‪) O‬ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ(‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻠﻬﺪﻑ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻬﺪ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪ B‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺷﺨﺼﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ e‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﺠﺎﻧﺲ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﻟﻮﻥ ﻭﻣﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﺸﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ F‬ﻣﻨﻈﺮ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻲ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﻗﺒﺔ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺑﺪء ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ[ ﻭ]ﺇﻃﺎﺭ[ ﻭ]ﻓﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺯﻣﻨﻲ[‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ‪.
PAGE 25
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫‪ s‬ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﻭﺩﻣﺞ ﻋﺪﺓ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻹﻧﺸﺎء ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺰﺍﻭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﻋﺮﻳﻀﺔ )ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﻴﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪ E‬ﺍﺿﻮﺍء ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻮﺭﺍ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ ﻭﻳﺪﻣﺠﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﺘﺒﺎﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻳﻠﺘﻘﻂ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺗﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺿﻮﺋﻲ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﻣﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺪﻭﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.O‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﺮﻋﻲ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻨﻬﺎﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪ΔϴμΨη ΓέϮλ‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ A‬ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ‪.
PAGE 26
‫‪4‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) GF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﺘﻤﻴﻴﺰ ﺃﺣﺪ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ‪ً 99‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 00:00:00‬ﻭ ‪.24:00:00‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻟﻺﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺣﻘﺔ ﺑﻴﻦ‬ ‫‪ 00:00:01‬ﻭ ‪.24:00:00‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﺘﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺸﻐﻞ[ ﻟﻠﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﻜﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺇﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺳﻠﺴﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 27
‫‪ s‬ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺩﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ s‬ﺑﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) G‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﻠﺬﻫﺎﺏ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﻟﻠﻀﺒﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﻓﺮﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺒﺎﻧﻮﺭﺍﻣﺎ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺪﻭﻱ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﻼﺛﺔ ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻭﺟﻤﻌﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺮﻛﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺟﻴﻬﻲ ﻭﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻳﺪﻭﻳًﺎ‪.
PAGE 28
‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ]ﻳﺪﻭﻱ[‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HIGF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺃﻱ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺗﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻻﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‬ ‫‪s‬‬ ‫‪SCN‬‬ ‫‪MANUAL‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺤﻴﺚ ﺗﺘﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺣﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻷﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺧﺎﻓﺖ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺍﻻﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻟﺘﻮﺣﻴﺪ ﺍﻃﺎﺭﻳﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫‪ 4‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 3‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺛﺎﻟﺚ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‪ .
PAGE 29
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪3.4‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪WB‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫‪4:3‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ ‪T‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﻌﻴﺪ ‪W‬‬ ‫‪00:34‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫‪4 NORM‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ*‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻟﻠﺘﻘﺮﻳﺐ‬ ‫ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‬ ‫*‪2‬‬ ‫*‪ 1‬ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.49‬‬ ‫*‪ 2‬ﺑﻔﻀﻞ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺃﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﻜﺴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻳﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻐﻴﺮ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﺎﺩﺍً ﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺣﺠﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 30
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺯﺭ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ(‬ ‫ﺗُﺨﺼﺺ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻤُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ ﺑﻜﺜﺮﺓ ﻟـ ‪) GFI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ(‪ .‬ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤُﺨﺼﺼﺔ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(103‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ #‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.
PAGE 31
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺒﺢ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺑﻄﺄ ﻓﻲ ]‪ .[#SLOW‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﻭﺛﺒﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ]ﺗﺤﻜﻢ ﻟﻠﺒﻌﺪ[ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (46‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﻐﻠﻖ[‪ ،‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [#RC‬ﻭ]‪.[#SLV‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻮﺽ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ )ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﺳﺐ( ﺍﻟﻤﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ،+/-‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﺘﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺳﻄﻮﻋﺎ‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻲ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺋﻲ‪ .
PAGE 32
‫ﻣﻔﺮﺩ‪/‬ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ jY‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ً‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪j‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ *‬ ‫‪c‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪* 1‬‬ ‫‪2 ،1‬‬ ‫‪d‬‬ ‫ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ‪* 2‬‬ ‫‪2 ،1‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻮﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ )ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﺩﻱ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺍﻟﻲ ﺑﻤﻌﺪﻝ ‪ 100‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 5‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﻧﻴﺔ )‪ (fps‬ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 33
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ jY‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪ [Y12‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [Y2‬ﺃﻭ ]‪ [YC‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫‪Y12‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ‪12 SEC‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻘﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ‬ ‫ﻷﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﺒﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‪ً .‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﻻ‪ ،‬ﻳﻀﻲء ﻣﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﺗﻲ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﻳﻮﻣﺾ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺛﺎﻧﻴﺘﻴﻦ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 34
‫‪) AFL‬ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ(‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻗﻔﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺟﺰﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪Focus‬‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ‪) k‬ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻬﺮ( ﻭ]][ ﻭ]\[ ﻭ]‪ [w‬ﻭ]_[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ‬ ‫^‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻭﻗﻔﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺩﻗﻴﻖ ﻟﻸﻣﺎﻡ‪/‬ﻟﻠﺨﻠﻒ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﻤﻘﻔﻞ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫‪) GF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ(‪.
PAGE 35
‫ﻣﻼﺣﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]ﻣﻼﺣﻖ[ ﻣﻘﺪﻣًﺎ ﻓﻲ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻳﻪ ﺍﻑ[ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (44‬ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﺴﻚ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﻑ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪ ،‬ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‬ ‫ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫• ﻹﻟﻐﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺘﺒﻊ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 36
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ )ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ(‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(103‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(41‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫‪9‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪0.0‬‬ ‫‪WB‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪AUTO‬‬ ‫‪16M‬‬ ‫‪4:3‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ‪ .............................‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪37‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ‪ ..................................‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪37‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪ ...
PAGE 37
‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪h‬‬ ‫‪Vivid‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﺯﺍﻫﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫‪Natural‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪j‬‬ ‫‪Muted‬‬ ‫ﻹﻧﺘﺎﺝ ﺩﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺃﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻄﻔﺄﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪8‬‬ ‫ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻲ ﺗﺸﻮﻩ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻤﻜﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫ﺗﻸﻷ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺃﺿﻮﺍء ﻭﺍﻣﻀﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻠﺘﺮ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﻃﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻨﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻌﻜﺲ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﺁﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫ﻣﺠﺰﺃﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻨﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ‪ .‬ﻳﻘﺪﻡ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺗﺄﺛﻴﺮ ﻓﻦ ﺍﻟﻔﺴﻴﻔﺴﺎء‪.
PAGE 38
‫‪#RC‬‬ ‫ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﺎﻋﻖ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺺ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ RC‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫‪ Olympus‬ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻟﻠﺘﻔﺎﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ "ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪RC‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪) "Olympus‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(98‬‬ ‫‪ #SLV‬ﻣﺴﺎﻋﺪ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺑﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺰﺍﻣﻦ ﻣﻊ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺷﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ #SLOW‬ﻣﺰﺍﻣﻨﺔ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺗُﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺮﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﻟﺘﻔﺘﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺎﺕ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺍﻹﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﻓﺘﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻓﻲ ‪.
PAGE 39
‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪.ISO‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫‪l‬‬ ‫‪ ISO‬ﺍﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺠﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺤﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎً ﻣﻊ ﺇﻋﻄﺎء ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻦ ﻫﺪﻑ ﻣﺘﺤﺮﻙ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ Q‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ #‬ﺍﻟﻘﻴﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺍﻗﻞ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﻗﻴﻤﺔ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪o/Y‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﺣﺘﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 40
‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫!‬ ‫‪4608×3456‬‬ ‫)‪*(JPEG+RAW‬‬ ‫‪4 ،3‬‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺑﻴﻜﺴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﻣﻠﻒ ‪ JPEG‬ﻭﻣﻠﻒ ‪ 2*RAW‬ﺑـ ]‪ [‬ﻛﻞ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪4608×3456‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺒﺮ ﻣﻦ ‪.A3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪3200×2400‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ‪.A3‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1920×1440‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺣﺠﻢ ‪.A4‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪640×480‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺮﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪u‬‬ ‫‪4:3‬‬ ‫‪v‬‬ ‫‪16:9‬‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫‪3:2‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪1:1‬‬ ‫ﻳﺤﺪﺩ ﻧﺴﺒﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ‪-‬ﺇﻟﻰ‪-‬ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 41
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫‪ωϮΟέ MENU‬‬ ‫‪ϲϜϴΗΎϣϮΗϭ΍‬‬ ‫‪΃ΪΑ΍ Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫·‪ΓΩΎϋ‬‬ ‫‪ςϐο‬‬ ‫‪Ϟψϟ΍ ϞϳΪόΗ‬‬ ‫‪iESP/ϪΟϭ‬‬ ‫‪ESP‬‬ ‫‪ϖϠϐϣ‬‬ ‫‪ϑ΍ Ϫϳ΍ ςϤϧ‬‬ ‫‪ESP/‬‬ ‫‪ϲϤϗέ ϡϭί‬‬ ‫‪ϱΩΎϋ‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪z‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪43‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪46‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫ﻣﻠﺤﻖ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻭﺗﻮ‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺹ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫‪5‬‬ ‫‪6‬‬ ‫‪7‬‬ ‫‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ‪/‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ‪) Wi-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(67‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ
PAGE 42
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻓﺮ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺻﻮﻝ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻨﻮﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﺍﻟﺨﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺟﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺃﻭ ﺧﻴﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﺻﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ‬ ‫"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(103‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭﺿﺎﻉ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪MENU‬‬ ‫‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ‪.
PAGE 43
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﺑﺮﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻲ‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻌﺎﺩﺓ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ ‪] z‬ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻧﻌﻢ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻴﺪ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 44
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺯﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ ‪] z‬ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﺛﻴﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﺰﻳﺎﺩﺓ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺃﺻﺒﺤﺖ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺇﻋﺘﺎﻣﺎً‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺖﻡ ﺿﺒﻂ ]‪ [ESP/n‬ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[n‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ]ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ[ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ]ﻣﻐﻠﻖ[‪.
PAGE 45
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫‪[ESP/n‬‬ ‫‪[ESP/‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ‪n] z‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪ESP‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻲ ﺳﻄﻮﻉ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ )ﻳﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻟﻠﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ(‪.‬‬ ‫‪) 5‬ﺑﻘﻌﺔ(‬ ‫ﻳﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺪﺙ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻴﺔ )ﻳﻘﻴﺲ ﺍﻟﺴﻄﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ]‪ ،[ESP‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻛﺰ ﻣﻈﻠﻤﺎً ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺧﻠﻔﻴﺔ ﻗﻮﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 46
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫‪ z‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺗﺠﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ‪] z‬ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﻳﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻬﺬﺍ ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺜﺒﺘﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻣﻞ ﺛﻼﺛﻲ ﺃﻭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺛﺎﺑﺖ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻢ ﺗﻔﻌﻴﻞ ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺿﻮﺿﺎء ﺻﺎﺩﺭﺓ ﻣﻦ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﺘﻢ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻥ ﺍﻻﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺷﺪﻳ ًﺪﺍ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪.
PAGE 47
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﺒﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ ﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺟﺴﻢ ﻣﻈﻠﻢ ‪] z‬ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺍﻭﺗﻮ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻳﻪ ﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻳﻪ ﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻳﻪ ﺍﻑ ﻟﻠﺘﻮﺿﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ ‪] z‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺎﺭﻱ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻠﻬﺎ‪ .
PAGE 48
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺘﻘﻄﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻮﺿﻊ ﺭﺃﺳﻲ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ‬ ‫‪] z‬ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]‪) [y‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (54‬ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ q‬ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻼﺋﻢ ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻮﺟﻬﺔ ﻟﻸﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻭ ﻟﻸﺳﻔﻞ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺣﻮﻝ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺮﺃﺳﻲ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻓﻘﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 49
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﻣﻤﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺼﺮﻱ ﻣﻊ ﺇﻧﺨﻔﺎﺽ ﺗﺪﻫﻮﺭ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪] z‬ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ[ ﻣﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪.[‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺮﻙ ﻫﻲ ]‪ [c‬ﻭ ]‪.[d‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺎﺡ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺧﻼﻑ ]‪ ،[Natural] ،[Vivid‬ﻭ ]‪.
PAGE 50
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫‪ A‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻻﻓﻼﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻻﻡ ‪] A‬ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪1080p‬‬ ‫‪720p‬‬ ‫‪(640×480) VGA‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪(640×480) *HS 120fps‬‬ ‫‪(320×240) 1*HS 240fps‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﺳﺎﺱ ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﻣﻌﺪﻝ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫*‪ :HS 1‬ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻫﺪﺍﻑ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺃﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﻄﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﺎﺣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻫﻮ ]‪ [Natural] ،[Vivid‬ﺃﻭ ]‪.
PAGE 51
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ ‪] A‬ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺇﺑﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺴﺘﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﺮﻳﺎﺡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺻﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ‪] A‬ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﺩﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ "ﻋﺎﺩﻱ" ﻟﻼﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺨﻔﺾ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻣﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻮﻯ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﺾ ﻛﻲ ﻻ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﺻﻮﺕ ﻧﻘﺮ ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻋﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪.
PAGE 52
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪] q‬ﻋﺎﻟﺞ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﺞ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫‪Q‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪52‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪52‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪53‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪53‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻠﻴﺢ ﺍﻟﻌﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﻤﺮﺍء‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪53‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪54‬‬ ‫ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻻﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪54‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﺣﺠﻢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪[Q] q‬‬ ‫ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺫﺍﺕ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻠﺔ ﺑﺤﺠﻢ ﺃﺻﻐﺮ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻳﺪ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻲ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪.
PAGE 53
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪[R] q‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﺞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺟﻴﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﻴﺔ ﻣﺼﺪﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺈﺿﺎﻓﺔ )ﺑﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ( ﺻﻮﺕ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 4‬ﺛﻮﺍﻧﻲ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﺎً ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﺮﺽ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻴﻜﺮﻭﻓﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻼﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 54
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪[y] q‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪1‬‬ ‫‪y‬‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻟﺞ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﻟﺘﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﻭﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻛﺮﺭ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺗﻮﺟﻴﻬﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺠﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺇﺩﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ‪.
PAGE 55
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻧﻔﺮﺍﺩﻳﺎً ﻭﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ ]ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) GF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪،‬‬ ‫‪OK‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ )‪(1‬‬ ‫‪4/30‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HIGF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪R‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﺴﺤﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﻹﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺔ ‪R‬‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺫﺭﺍﻉ ﺍﻟﺰﻭﻡ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ‪ T‬ﻟﻠﻌﻮﺩﺓ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪ MENU‬ﺇﻟﻐﺎء‪/‬ﻣﺴﺢ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﺩﻱ‪.
PAGE 56
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﻞ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪] q‬ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ[‬ ‫ﺑﻀﺒﻂ ﻃﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻌﻬﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ[ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ .(70‬ﻭﺑﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﻓﻲ ]ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ[ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ ،(70‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪ A‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪.h‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﻛﺮﺭ ‪ 1‬ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻟﻠﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ ‬ﻹﻧﻬﺎء ]ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ[‪.
PAGE 57
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫‪[Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi]] d Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻴﻊ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﻡ ﺗﻤﻜﻴﻦ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪.Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﻟﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﻤﺖ ﺑﺸﺮﺍء ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪.
PAGE 58
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ ‪] d‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪[USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺃﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﻠﻤﺎ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﻘﺎﺭﺉ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪MTP‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪/ Windows 8 / Windows 7 / Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪ ،Windows 8.1‬ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﻣﺤﻤﻮﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪.PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ[‪.
PAGE 59
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫‪ d‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ‪] d‬ﺧﺎﺭﻃﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻜﺴﻞ[‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻴﺴﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺣﺎﺟﺔ ﻷﻱ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺸﺮﺍء ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ .‬ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﻣﺮ ًﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻷﻗﻞ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺃﻭ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺗﻨﻔﻴﺬ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﺃﺩﻳﺮﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺭﺳﻢ ﺧﺮﻳﻄﺔ ﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﻓﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻱ‪.
PAGE 60
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻟﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ‪[l] d‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﻟﻐﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻠﻐﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﺍﺋﻢ ﻭﺭﺳﺎﺋﻞ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ‪[X] d‬‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ GF‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺴﻨﺔ ]ﺱ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ I‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﺎﻟﺴﻨﺔ ]ﺱ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺓ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ ،2‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪ HIGF‬ﻣﻦ ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ ﻟﻀﺒﻂ ]ﺵ[ )ﺍﻟﺸﻬﺮ(‪] ،‬ﻱ[ )ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻡ(‪] ،‬ﻭﻗﺖ[‬ ‫)ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﻟﺪﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‪ ،‬ﻭ]ﻱ‪/‬ﺵ‪/‬ﺱ[ )ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ(‪ ،‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 61
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺧﺼﻴﺼﺎ ﻟﻠﻈﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪] d‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺑﺔ[‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‪/‬ﻋﻤﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﻲ )ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻱ‪/‬ﺍﻟﻬﻴﺪﺭﻭﻟﻴﻜﻲ( )ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ(‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻟﻠﻘﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺶ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺗﺒﻌﺎ ﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﺍﻷﺭﺻﺎﺩ ﺍﻟﺠﻮﻳﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺍﺕ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﻣﺮﺟﻌﻚ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺑﺔ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻴﺎﺱ‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ‪.
PAGE 62
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ )ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ(‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ 1‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ 2‬ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻼﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻳﻠﻐﻲ ]ﺇ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﻨﺸﻴﻂ ]ﺇ ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺗﺤﻜﻢ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻀﺒﻂ ﻗﻮﺓ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺑﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻰ ﻛﻞ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ﻣﻦ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪) .
PAGE 63
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻜﻢ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﻘﺮ‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﻌﺎﻳﺮﺓ[ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺠﺰء ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﺩ ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻠﻪ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪) GF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]ﺑﻘﻮﺓ[ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪) GF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.I‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]ﺗﻮﻗﻴﺖ[ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ‪) GF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﻟﻨﻘﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ‪.
PAGE 64
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫‪ d‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻟﻘﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ‪] d‬ﺍﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪[GPS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻴﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪A-GPS‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺍﻹﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.GPS‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻹﻗﺪﺍﻡ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪.GPS‬‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻀﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﺴﺎﻋﺔ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪.GPS UTC‬‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ‪.
PAGE 65
‫ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ ﻷﺳﻠﻮﺏ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍﺟﻊ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(42‬‬ ‫ﻳﻌﺪﻝ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ‪] d‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ[‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪2‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻋﻴﺔ ‪3‬‬ ‫ﺇﻃﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺇﻟﻰ ‪) 99‬ﺇﻃﺎﺭ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪء ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ 00:00:00‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪24:00:00‬‬ ‫)ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻻﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻞ ﺯﻣﻨﻲ‬ ‫‪ 00:00:01‬ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫‪24:00:00‬‬ ‫)ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ(‬ ‫ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻔﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﺰﻣﻨﻲ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻐﻠﻖ‬ ‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻛﻞ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻹﻃﺎﺭﺍﺕ ﻛﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.
PAGE 66
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺘﺎﻉ ﺑﻤﺰﻳ ٍﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﻣﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻼﻝ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺃﻣﻮﺭ ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﻡ ﺑﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫)‪OLYMPUS Image Share (OI.Share‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﻨﺰﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻦ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻭﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‪.
PAGE 67
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪4‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺼﺐ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻔﻚ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪OI.Share App‬‬ ‫ّ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[ ﻓﻲ ‪ d‬ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ‪ 1‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪.A‬‬ ‫• ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻤﺮﺍﺭ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺯﺭ ‪ ‬ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﺪء ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ]‪ Wi-Fi‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺩﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻭﺻﻠﺔ ‪.Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺫﺍ ‪ OI.Share‬ﺍﻟﻨﺸﻄﺔ ﻟﻘﺮﺍءﺓ ﻛﻮﺩ ‪ QR‬ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺽ ﺑﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻳﺒﺪﺃ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ‪.
PAGE 68
‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺤﻤﻴﻠﻬﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻳﺪ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺘﻬﺎ ً‬ ‫]ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ[ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(56‬‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺒﻘﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪) .‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(67‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺯﺭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ‪.OI.Share‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫"ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) "Wi-Fi‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(67‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻨﺪ ﻇﻬﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‪:‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻠﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 69
‫ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺎﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ ﺑﻴﻨﻤﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﻣﻦ ﺧﻼﻝ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻔﻮﻅ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﺮ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺇﻻ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ OI.Share‬ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺘﺎﺡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‬ ‫‪ Add Location‬ﻟﻠﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ‪.GPS‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﺪء ﻓﻲ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺳﺠﻞ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻌﺎﻟﻤﻲ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ‪ OI.
PAGE 70
‫ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪] :‬ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻬﺎ ﺗﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪،‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻣﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ]ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺑﻬﺎ ﺇﻋﺪﺍ ًﺩﺍ‬ ‫ﻳُﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻣﺮﺓ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ[ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﻫﺎﺗﻒ ﺫﻛﻲ ﺁﺧﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﺼﻨﻊ ﺍﻻﻓﺘﺮﺍﺿﻲ ﻫﻮ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ[‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ‪ d‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ [.‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) I‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ(‪.
PAGE 71
‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻐﺎء ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻼﺕ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺭﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ‪ d‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ [h‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) I‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﺸﺒﻜﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ ‪ LAN‬ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﻌﻤﻞ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪.[Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [Wi-Fi‬ﻓﻲ ‪ d‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪ 3‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻌﻴﻴﻦ ‪ [Wi-Fi‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪) I‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻧﻌﻢ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.
PAGE 72
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ GPS‬ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﻭﺧﻂ ﺍﻟﻄﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺇﻟﻴﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺠﻬﺰﺓ ﻟﻤﻼﺣﺔ ‪.GPS‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،GPS‬ﺍﻗﺮﺃ "ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪ ،GPS‬ﺍﻟﺒﻮﺻﻠﺔ ﺍﻹﻟﻜﺘﺮﻭﻧﻴﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(110‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺑﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪﺍﻥ ﻭﺍﻟﻤﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﻣﻦ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﻧﻮﻧﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻃﻠﺐ ﻣﺴﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﻜﻮﻣﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻬﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺴﺒﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻲ ﻣﻨﺎﻃﻖ ﻣﺒﻴﻌﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﻴﻨﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻻ ﺗﻌﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.
PAGE 73
‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) GPS‬ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪(A-GPS‬‬ ‫ﺍﻋﺘﻤﺎ ًﺩﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺘﻐﺮﻕ ﺍﻷﻣﺮ ً‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﺎ ﻟﻠﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ‪ ،A-GPS‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻘﺼﻴﺮ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻣﻦ ﺑﻀﻊ ﺛﻮﺍﻥ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺑﻀﻊ ﻋﺸﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺜﻮﺍﻧﻲ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ‪ A-GPS‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﺗﻒ ﺍﻟﺬﻛﻲ )‪"OLYMPUS Image Track" (OI.Track‬‬ ‫ﺃﻭ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ "‪."OLYMPUS A-GPS Utility‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻥ ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻀﺒﻮﻁ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺧﺎﺹ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 74
‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ‪) GPS‬ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪(GPS‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [GPS‬ﻓﻲ ‪ d‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (64‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ [GPS‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﻣﺸﻐﻞ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.A‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪i‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻣﺾ ‪ G‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﻑ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‬ ‫‪ G‬ﻭﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻤﺠﺮﺩ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﻗﻴﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺿﺎﻓﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﻠﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺖ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫‪0.
PAGE 75
‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ A‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺚ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻴﺎﺱ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻀﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪ INFO‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺇﻳﻘﺎﻑ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺗﺘﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﻛﺔ )ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ(‬ ‫‪ 1‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪ [GPS‬ﻓﻲ ‪ d‬ﺿﺒﻂ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺋﻤﺔ ‪) 3‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (64‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.A‬‬ ‫‪ 2‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﺭ[ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.A‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﺩﺭﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ 3‬ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ‪ A‬ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻃﺮﻳﻘﺔ ﺗﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﺴﻠﺴﻞ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﻗﻊ )ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﺠﻞ(‪.
PAGE 76
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪) AV‬ﺻﻮﺕ ﻭﻓﻴﺪﻳﻮ( )ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ‬ ‫ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺻﻮﺭ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺗﻠﻔﺎﺯ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﺪﻗﺔ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻠﻪ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪) AV‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‪(CB-AVC3 :‬‬ ‫)ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ )ﺍﻷﺻﻔﺮ(‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺒﺲ ﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ )ﺍﻷﺑﻴﺾ(‪(.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫)ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ‪HDMI‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻠﻴﻔﺰﻳﻮﻥ‪(.
PAGE 77
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ A/V‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﺴﻮﻑ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻜﺎﺑﻞ ‪.HDMI‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ HDMI‬ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻘﺎ ﻳﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﺒﺮ ﻛﺒﻞ ‪ ،HDMI‬ﺳﺘﺘﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺇﺷﺎﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪ .‬ﺍﺧﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺍﻹﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻔﺎﺯ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1080i‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ‪.1080i HDMI‬‬ ‫‪720p‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻣﻨﺢ ﺍﻷﻭﻟﻮﻳﺔ ﻟﻠﺨﺮﺝ ‪.720p HDMI‬‬ ‫‪480p/576p‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺨﺮﺝ ‪ .480p/576p HDMI‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪ 576p‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ]‪ [PAL‬ﻟـ‬ ‫]ﻣﺨﺮﺝ ﺍﻟﻔﻴﺪﻳﻮ[ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.
PAGE 78
‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )‪(PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ‪ PictBridge‬ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ ،USB‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺠﻠﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮ ًﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ]ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ[ ﻟـ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪) [USB‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (58‬ﻓﻲ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ ﻟﻠﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪AR 78‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.
PAGE 79
‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ‪) I‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ(‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﻈﻬﺮ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎء ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ .‬ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) HI‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ(‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺨﺮﻭﺝ‪ ،‬ﺍﻓﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﻋﺮﺽ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺼﺼﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻭﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﻤﻄﺎﻟﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﻀﻴﻒ‪ .
PAGE 80
‫ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﻏﺐ ﻓﻲ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺘﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺪﺩﺓ ً‬ ‫ﻻﺣﻘﺎ )ﺣﺠﺰ ﺇﻃﺎﺭ ﺃﺣﺎﺩﻱ( ﺃﻭ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﻬﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ΔϳΩέϓ ΔϋΎΑρ‬‬ ‫‪ΔϋΎΑρ‬‬ ‫‪4/30‬‬ ‫‪NORM‬‬ ‫‪4608 3456‬‬ ‫‪100-0004‬‬ ‫‪’15/02/26 12:30‬‬ ‫‪έΛϛ΍‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(f‬‬ ‫ﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﻫﻨﺎﻙ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺗﻢ ﺗﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺧﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺤﺠﺰ‬ ‫]ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ[ ﻋﻠﻴﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺴﺘﺘﻢ ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺠﻮﺯﺓ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﺮﺩﻳﺔ )‪(t‬‬ ‫ﻟﺘﻄﺒﻴﻖ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺮﻭﺿﺔ ﺣﺎﻟﻴًﺎ‪ .
PAGE 81
‫ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ )‪(DPOF‬‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‪ ،‬ﻳﺘﻢ ﺣﻔﻆ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﻌﺎﺕ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻟﻤﻄﺒﻮﻉ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪ .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ‬ ‫ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻠﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﻱ ﻳﺪﻋﻢ ‪ DPOF‬ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺰﻧﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻘﻂ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺠﻮﺯﺍﺕ ‪ DPOF‬ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻄﻬﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ‪ DPOF‬ﺁﺧﺮ ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺗﻐﻴﻴﺮﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻐﻴﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻲ‪ .
PAGE 82
‫■ ﺣﺠﺰ ﻃﺒﻌﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ ﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ]‪[U‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ]<[ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(81‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) GF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]‪ ،[U‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 5‬ﻭ ‪ 6‬ﻓﻲ ]<[‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺟﻤﻴﻊ ﺑﻴﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﺣﺠﺰ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺒﻊ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﻮﺗﻴﻦ ‪ 1‬ﻭ ‪ 2‬ﻓﻲ ]<[ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(81‬‬ ‫ﻓﺤﺪﺩ ﺇﻣﺎ ]<[ ﺃﻭ ]‪ ،[U‬ﺛﻢ ﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ‪.A‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ‪) GF‬ﻟﻮﺣﺔ ﺍﻷﺳﻬﻢ( ﻻﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ]ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ[‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺿﻐﻂ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ ‪.
PAGE 83
‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻄﺮﻑ ﺍﻷﺻﻐﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻔﺬ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺻﻞ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ‬ ‫ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪USB‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺃﻱ ﺷﻲء ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺸﺤﻮﻧﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺬﺭ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﻢ ﺑﻔﺼﻞ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﻭﺗﺤﻘﻖ ﻣﻦ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩ ]ﺍﺗﺼﺎﻝ ‪[USB‬‬ ‫)ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (58‬ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺍﻟﺸﺨﺼﻲ ﻣﺮﺓ ﺃﺧﺮﻯ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺠﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﺒﺮ ‪ .
PAGE 84
‫ﻧﺴﺦ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‬ ‫ﺗﺪﻋﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﺌﺔ ﺃﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﺮﻳﻦ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ‪ .USB Mass Storage Class‬ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺇﻟﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻛﺎﺑﻞ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ‪ .‬ﺗﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﺃﻧﻈﻤﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻣﻊ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ ‪:USB‬‬ ‫‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪/ Windows 7 SP1 / Windows Vista SP2 / Windows XP SP3‬‬ ‫‪Windows 8.1 / Windows 8‬‬ ‫‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫‪Mac OS X v10.5–v10.9‬‬ ‫ﻟﻢ ﻳﻌﺪ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ‪ Windows XP‬ﻣﺪﻋﻮﻣًﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺎﻳﻜﺮﻭﺳﻮﻓﺖ‪ .
PAGE 85
‫ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‬ ‫■ ‪Windows‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻲ ﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Windows XP‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ " ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ"‪.‬‬ ‫‪/ Windows 8 / Windows 7 / Windows Vista‬‬ ‫‪Windows 8.1‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺮﺑﻊ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ " ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻲ"‪ .‬ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ " ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ‬ ‫‪ "OLYMPUS‬ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ " ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ"‪ ،‬ﻓﺤﺪﺩ "ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ" )‪ (Windows XP‬ﺃﻭ "ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ"‬ ‫)‪ (Windows 7/Windows Vista‬ﻣﻦ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ "ﺍﺑﺪﺃ"‪ .
PAGE 86
‫■ ‪Macintosh‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﺴﻲ ﺩﻱ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺤﺮﻙ ﺍﻷﻗﺮﺍﺹ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻃﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫ﻳﺠﺐ ﻋﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ ﺗﻠﻘﺎﺋﻴًﺎ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻈﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺰﺩﻭﺟﺎ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺭﻣﺰ ﺍﻟﻘﺮﺹ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻭﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﻳﺘﻢ ﻋﺮﺿﻬﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﺮ ً‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻐﻮﻁ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﺐ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻣﺮﺗﻴﻦ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺃﻳﻘﻮﻧﺔ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ" ﻟﻌﺮﺽ ﺣﻮﺍﺭ "ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ"‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ‪.OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺤﺺ ﻣﺘﻄﻠﺒﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺪء ﺍﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﺮ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻟﺰﺭ "‪ "OLYMPUS Viewer 3‬ﻭﺍﺗﺒﻊ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﺘﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﻧﺎﻣﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ‬ ‫‪Mac OS X v10.5–v10.
PAGE 87
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﻟﻢ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻘﺼﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺧﻄﺄ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻟﻢ ﺗﻜﻦ ﻣﺘﺄﻛﺪﺍً ﻣﻤﺎ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻌﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﺭﺟﻊ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻹﺻﻼﺡ ﺍﻟﻌﻄﻞ‪/‬ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺤﺮﻱ ﺍﻷﻋﻄﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺻﻼﺣﻬﺎ‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫"ﺇﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﻭﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪(4‬‬ ‫ﺃﺩﺧﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻣﻌﺎﺩ ﺷﺤﻨﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻻﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺼﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺃﺩﺍء ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻗﺪ ﻗﻞ ﻣﺆﻗﺘﺎً ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺨﻔﻀﺔ‪ .‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﻢ‬ ‫ﺑﺘﺪﻓﺌﺘﻬﺎ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﻭﺿﻌﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺟﻴﺒﻚ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺓ ﻭﺟﻴﺰﺓ‪.
PAGE 88
‫■ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﺻﻌﻮﺑﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﺅﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺭﺑﻤﺎ ﻳﻜﻮﻥ ﺍﻟﺘﻜﺎﺛﻒ ﻗﺪ ﺣﺪﺙ‪ .‬ﺃﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﻠﻖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻧﺘﻈﺮ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻳﺘﻜﻴﻒ ﺟﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻊ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻴﻄﺔ ﻭﺟﻔﻔﻪ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻀﻮء ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﻗﻒ ﺍﻟﻤﻈﻠﻤﺔ ﻳﻨﺘﺞ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﺑﺎﻧﻌﻜﺎﺳﺎﺕ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻛﺜﻴﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻬﻮﺍء‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﻭﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﺩ ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﻭﺍﻟﻮﻗﺖ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ﺍﻷﺻﻠﻴﺔ‪.
PAGE 89
‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺇﺣﺪﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺷﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﺍﻗﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺮﺍﺟﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺤﻲ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺄ ﺑﺎﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺟﺪﻳﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﺤﻤﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻢ ﺿﺒﻂ ﺗﺒﺪﻳﻞ ﺣﻤﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ "‪ "LOCK‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﺮﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺘﺒﺪﻳﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺫﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﻣﻤﺘﻠﺌﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ‬ ‫• ﻗﻢ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪*.
PAGE 90
‫ﻋﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﺤﻴﺢ‬ ‫ﺭﺳﺎﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺄ‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻣﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﺨﺘﺎﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﺮﻣﺠﻴﺎﺕ ﺗﻨﻤﻴﻖ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﻔﻮﺗﻮﻏﺮﺍﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺇﻟﺦ ﻟﻤﻌﺎﻟﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻓﺎﺭﻏﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺗﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺍﻟﻜﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﻭﺭﻕ‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﺤﻤﻴﻞ ﻭﺭﻕ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻮﺟﺪ ﺣﺒﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺃﻋﺪ ﻣﻞء ﺍﻟﺤﺒﺮ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻄﻞ ﺑﺎﻟﻄﺎﺑﻌﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﻮﺭﻕ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺸﻮﺭ‪.
PAGE 91
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺘﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻛﻴﻔﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﺗﺮﺍﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺎﻟﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫■ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺮﻛﺰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﺷﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺰ ﺍﻟﺒﺆﺭﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺎﻓﺔ ﻛﺎﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻜﻮﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻠﻘﻄﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻘﻂ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪9‬‬ ‫ﺿﻐﻂ ﺯﺭ ﺍﻟﻐﺎﻟﻖ ﻟﻠﻤﻨﺘﺼﻒ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪44‬‬ ‫ﺍﺿﺒﻂ ]ﻧﻤﻂ ﺍﻳﻪ ﺍﻑ[ ﺇﻟﻰ ]ﻭﺟﻪ‪.[iESP/‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪35‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻤﻂ ]ﻣﻼﺣﻖ[‪.
PAGE 92
‫■ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪46‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﻌﻤﺎﻝ ]ﺗﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻜﺸﺘﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺣﺮﻛﺔ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺣﺘﻰ ﻟﻮ ﻟﻢ ﺗﺰﺩ ﺣﺴﺎﺳﻴﺔ ‪ .ISO‬ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻮﻇﻴﻔﺔ ﻓﻌﺎﻟﺔ ً‬ ‫ﺃﻳﻀﺎ ﻋﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﻋﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺘﻜﺒﻴﺮ ﺯﻭﻡ ٍ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪50‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﺍﻷﻓﻼﻡ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ]ﻣﻀﺎﺩ ﺍﻫﺘﺰﺍﺯ[‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪24‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮ ]‪ J‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ[ ﻓﻲ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﻫﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺿﻊ ]‪ J‬ﺭﻳﺎﺿﺔ[ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺳﺮﻋﺔ ﻏﺎﻟﻖ ﺳﺮﻳﻌﺔ ﻭﻳﻤﻜﻨﻪ ﺗﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻀﺒﺎﺑﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺠﻠﻮﺑﺔ ﺑﻮﺍﺳﻄﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺤﺮﻙ‪.
PAGE 93
‫■ ﺗﺪﺭﺝ ﺍﻟﻠﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﻷﻟﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﻲ ﻧﻔﺲ ﺍﻟﻈﻞ ﺣﻴﺚ ﺗﻈﻬﺮ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪38‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻋﻦ ﻃﺮﻳﻖ ﺗﺤﺪﻳﺪ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺎﺽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺤﺼﻮﻝ ﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺃﻓﻀﻞ ﺍﻟﻨﺘﺎﺋﺞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻌﻈﻢ ﺍﻟﺒﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺔ ]‪ WB‬ﺍﻭﺗﻮﻣﺎﺗﻴﻜﻲ[‪ ،‬ﻟﻜﻦ ﺑﺎﻟﻨﺴﺒﺔ‬ ‫ﻟﺒﻌﺾ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﻮﻋﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻳﻨﺒﻐﻲ ﻋﻠﻴﻚ ﻣﺤﺎﻭﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺮﻳﺐ ﺑﺘﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻔﺔ‪) .‬ﻫﺬﺍ ﺣﻘﻴﻘﻲ ﺑﺼﻔﺔ ﺧﺎﺻﺔ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ‬ ‫ﻇﻞ ﺍﻟﺸﻤﺲ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺳﻤﺎء ﺻﺎﻓﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺗﻬﻴﺌﺎﺕ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﻃﺒﻴﻌﻴﺔ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻄﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ﺻﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﻫﻠﻢ ﺟﺮﺍ‪(.‬‬ ‫■ ﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺃﻛﺜﺮ ﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺯﻭﻡ ﺑﺼﺮﻳًﺎ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻜﺒﻴﺮًﺍ ﻋﺎﻟﻲ ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻮﺡ‪.
PAGE 94
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﻴﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻭﺗﺨﺰﻳﻨﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻌﻨﺎﻳﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺠﺴﻢ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺑﺮﻓﻖ ﺑﻘﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﻟﻴﻨﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﺘﺴﺨﺔ ﺟ ًﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﻧﻘﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻤﺎﺵ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻭﺻﺎﺑﻮﻥ ﻣﻌﺘﺪﻝ ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺼﻮﺭﺓ ﻭﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺟﻔﻔﻬﺎ ﺑﻘﻤﺎﺷﺔ ﺟﺎﻓﺔ‪ .‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻛﻨﺖ ﻗﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻣﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺸﺎﻃﺊ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻗﻄﻌﺔ ﻗﻤﺎﺵ ﺑﻌﺪ ﻏﻤﺴﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﺎء ﻧﻈﻴﻒ ﻭﺍﻋﺼﺮﻫﺎ ﺟﻴ ًﺪﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻗﺪ ﺗﻠﺘﺼﻖ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺃﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻣﻊ ﻣﻮﺍﺩ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻘﺬﺍﺭﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻐﺒﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﻞ‪.
PAGE 95
‫ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻟﻔﺘﺮﺍﺕ ﻣﻤﺘﺪﺓ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﻔﻈﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﻑ ﺟﻴﺪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﻢ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺩﻭﺭﻱ ﺑﺈﺩﺧﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺍﺧﺘﺒﺮ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺪﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻴﻤﺎﻭﻳﺔ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺇﻥ ﻫﺬﺍ ﻗﺪ ﻳﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻨﻪ ﺍﻟﺘﺂﻛﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ‪ USB-‬ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻊ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪) F-3AC USB‬ﻳﺒﺎﻉ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺣﺪﺓ( ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻱ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺗﻴﺎﺭ ﻣﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻰ ﺑﻪ‪ .
PAGE 96
‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪Eye-Fi‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﻭﺍﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺒﻠﺪ ﺣﻴﺚ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﺍﻧﺰﻉ‬ ‫ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﻭ ﻗﻢ ﺑﺘﻌﻄﻴﻞ ﻭﻇﺎﺋﻒ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻄﺎﺋﺮﺍﺕ ﻭﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺤﻈﺮ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺰﺩﺍﺩ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﺃﺛﻨﺎء ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻨﻔﺬ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺳﺮﻳﻌًﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺑﻄﺎﻗﺔ ‪ ،Eye-Fi‬ﻗﺪ ﺗﻌﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺑﺒﻂء‪.
PAGE 97
‫ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺤﻔﻆ )ﺻﻮﺭ ﺛﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‪ /‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺪﺓ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ )ﺃﻓﻼﻡ(‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺄﻋﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ﺍﻟﻘﺎﺑﻠﺔ ﻟﻠﺘﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﻭﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒﻴﺔ‪ .‬ﺗﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺴﻌﺔ ﺍﻟﻔﻌﻠﻴﺔ ﺣﺴﺐ‬ ‫ﻇﺮﻭﻑ ﺍﻟﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻣﺔ‪.
PAGE 98
‫ﺍﺯﺩﻳﺎﺩ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻃﻬﺎ‬ ‫ﺇﻣﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺗﻘﻮﻡ ﺑﻤﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻏﻮﺑﺔ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ﺗﻮﺻﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻛﻤﺒﻴﻮﺗﺮ ﺃﻭ ﺟﻬﺎﺯ ﺁﺧﺮ ﻟﺤﻔﻆ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻭﺣﻴﻨﺌﺬ ﺍﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺟﻮﺩﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫]ﻣﺴﺢ[ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪] ،(54 ،13‬ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ‪ .‬ﺻﻮﺭﺓ[‪] ،‬ﻣﺴﺢ ﺍﻟﺠﻤﻴﻊ[‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ ]ﻣﺴﺢ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﺔ[ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪] ،(54‬ﺗﺸﻜﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ[‪]/‬ﺗﺸﻜﻴﻞ[ )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪.(56‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻠﺤﻘﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺒﻴﻌﺔ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﻣﻨﻔﺼﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﻨﻈﺎﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ‪ RC‬ﻻ ﺳﻠﻜﻲ ‪Olympus‬‬ ‫ﻳﻤﻜﻨﻚ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻓﻼﺵ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 99
‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪ ﺿﺒﻂ ﻓﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ]‪ ،[#RC‬ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺧﻠﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻻﺗﺼﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﻦ ﺃﺟﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺻﻮﺭ ﺑﺎﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﻼﺳﻠﻜﻲ‪ ،‬ﻭّﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﺸﻌﺮ ﻋﻦ ﺑُﻌﺪ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻭﻭّﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﻬﺪﻑ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪/‬ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﻳﺘﻮﻓﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﻋﻴﻦ ﺳﻤﻜﺔ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺘﻘﺎﻁ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺘﺄﻛﻴﺪ ﺑﻘﻮﺓ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻭﺗﻌﺎﺑﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻮﺟﻪ ﺍﻟﻔﺮﻳﺪﺓ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﻭﻣﺎ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﺗﻠﻲ ﻛﻮﻧﻔﺮﺗﺮ ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ‪.
PAGE 100
‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﻧﺰﻉ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪LED‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ‬ ‫‪LED‬‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‪/‬ﺇﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﻋﺪﺳﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‪/‬ﻓﻠﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺤﻮﻳﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻹﺯﺍﻟﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻟﻠﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﻠﺘﺮ‬ ‫‪Ø40.5‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻬﺎﻳﺊ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺃﻭ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ LED‬ﺑﺎﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ ،‬ﻗﻢ ﺑﻤﺤﺎﺫﺍﺓ ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻣﺎﺕ ﻭﻟﻔﻬﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺍﺗﺠﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﺮﻛﻴﺐ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺗﺴﺘﻘﺮ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻬﺎ ﻭﺗﺼﺪﺭ ﻧﻘﺮﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ LED‬ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻨﺪﻣﺎ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺜﺒﻴﺖ ﻣﻮﺟﻪ ﺇﺿﺎءﺓ ‪ ،LED‬ﻻ ﺗﻄﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‪.
PAGE 101
‫ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﻫﺎﻣﺔ ﺣﻮﻝ ﻣﺰﺍﻳﺎ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻭﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪ :‬ﺗﻀﻤﻦ*‪ 1‬ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﺩ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﻟﻠﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺃﻋﻤﺎﻕ ﺣﺘﻰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 15‬ﻡ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ﺗﺼﻞ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺳﺎﻋﺔ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﻳﺘﻢ ﺗﺨﻄﻲ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﺼﻤﻮﺩ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻌﺮﺿﺖ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﺒﻴﺮﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺯﺍﺋﺪﺓ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ‪ :‬ﺗﻀﻤﻦ*‪ 2‬ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺗﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺿﺪ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻨﺎﺷﺌﺔ ﻋﻦ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻴﻮﻣﻲ ﻟﻠﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺪﻣﺠﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﻚ‪ .‬ﺇﻥ ﻣﻴﺰﺓ ﻣﻘﺎﻭﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﻻ ﺗﻀﻤﻦ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻴﺐ ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻠﻒ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺭﺟﻲ‪ .
PAGE 102
‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ‪:‬‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫•‬ ‫ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﺴﺢ ﺃﻱ ﺯﺍﺋﺪ ﺃﻭ ﺃﻱ ﺁﺛﺎﺭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﺍﻟﻤﺎء‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺤﺖ ﻣﻴﺎﻩ ﺍﻟﺒﺤﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﻏﻤﺮ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺩﻟﻮ ﻳﺤﺘﻮﻱ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﺎء‬ ‫ﻋﺬﺏ ﻟﻤﺪﺓ ‪ 10‬ﺩﻗﺎﺋﻖ ﺗﻘﺮﻳﺒًﺎ )ﻣﻊ ﻏﻠﻖ ﻏﻄﺎء ﺣﺠﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺔ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﻗﺔ ﻭﻏﻄﺎء‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺻﻞ ﺑﺈﺣﻜﺎﻡ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻘﻔﻞ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻧﻪ ﻭﺣﻠﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﻌﺪﺳﺔ ﻣﻨﺰﻭﻋﺔ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻌﺪ ﺫﻟﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﺗﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺗﺠﻒ ﻓﻲ ﻣﻜﺎﻥ ﻣﻈﻠﻞ ﺟﻴﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﻬﻮﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 103
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﻛﻞ ﻭﺿﻊ ﺗﺼﻮﻳﺮ‬ ‫ﻟﻤﻌﺮﻓﺔ ﺍﻹﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺎﺣﺔ ﻟـ ^ ﻭ‪ ، O‬ﺍﺭﺟﻊ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ^" )ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪ (104‬ﻭ"ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ‬ ‫ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪) "O‬ﺻﻔﺤﺔ ‪"(105‬‬ ‫‪k‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪P‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪m‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪o‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪p‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪n‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R
PAGE 104
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ^‬ ‫]‬ ‫―‬ ‫\‬ ‫―‬ ‫[‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪w‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫_‬ ‫―‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫‪WB‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ‪/Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫
PAGE 105
‫ﻗﺎﺋﻤﺔ ﺇﻋﺪﺍﺩﺍﺕ ‪O‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫‪3 2 C U G H # 1 F e B‬‬ ‫― ― ― ‪― ― ― ― ― ― ― R‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪R R‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪WB‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪o/Y‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫*‪1‬
PAGE 106
‫ﻧﻤﻂ ﺻﻮﺭﺓ‬ ‫` ‪E s s g ^ _ X‬‬ ‫― ― ― ― ― ― ― ―‬ ‫ﻓﻼﺵ‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫ﺗﻌﻮﻳﺾ ﺍﻟﻔﻼﺵ‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺪﻳﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺮﻳﺾ‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪WB‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪ISO‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪R‬‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫―‬ ‫‪o/Y‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺎﺱ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭﺓ )ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ(‬ ‫‪R R R R R R‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫*‪1‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺪﺃ ‪/Wi-Fi‬ﺇﻧﻬﺎء ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪R R R R R R‬‬
PAGE 107
‫ﺍﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺴﻼﻣﺔ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ ﺍﻟﺼﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﺑﻴﺔ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺗﺸﻐﻞ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﺔ‪ :‬ﻟﺘﻘﻠﻴﻞ ﻣﺨﺎﻃﺮ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺻﺪﻣﺔ ﻛﻬﺮﺑﺎﺋﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺈﺯﺍﻟﺔ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء )ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻐﻄﺎء ﺍﻟﺨﻠﻔﻲ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﻼ ﺗﻮﺟﺪ ﺃﺟﺰﺍء ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﺻﻴﺎﻧﺘﻬﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﺪﺍﺧﻞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﺣﺎﻟﺔ ﻋﻤﻠﻴﺔ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺇﻟﻰ ﻣﻮﻇﻔﻲ ﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻤﺆﻫﻠﻴﻦ ﻓﻲ ﺷﺮﻛﺔ ‪.OLYMPUS‬‬ ‫ﺗُﻨﺒﻬﻚ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺠﺐ ﺑﺪﺍﺧﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺜﻠﺚ ﺇﻟﻰ ﺗﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺸﻐﻴﻞ ﻭﺍﻟﺼﻴﺎﻧﺔ ﺍﻟﻬﺎﻣﺔ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻨﺪﺍﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻘﺔ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﺮ‬ ‫ﺇﺫﺍ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺩﻭﻥ ﻣﺮﺍﻋﺎﺓ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺿﺤﺔ ﺿﻤﻦ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﻟﺮﻣﺰ‪ ،‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺆﺩﻱ ﺫﻟﻚ‬ ‫ﺇﻟﻰ ﺣﺪﻭﺙ ﺇﺻﺎﺑﺔ ﺷﺪﻳﺪﺓ ﺃﻭ ﻭﻓﺎﺓ‪.
PAGE 108
‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺃﺑﺪًﺍ ﻓﻮﻕ ﺍﻷﺟﻬﺰﺓ ﺍﻟﻜﻬﺮﻭﻣﻐﻨﺎﻃﻴﺴﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺑﺎﻟﻘﺮﺏ ﻣﻨﻬﺎ‪ .‬ﻓﻘﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﻫﺬﺍ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﻢ ﺑﺘﻮﺻﻴﻞ ﺍﻷﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﺄﻱ ﺃﺷﻴﺎء ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺗﺨﺬ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻴﺎﻃﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻼﺯﻣﺔ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺨﺰﻳﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻤﻨﻌﻬﺎ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻼﻣﺴﺔ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻌﺪﻧﻴﺔ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﺤﻠﻲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺪﺑﺎﺑﻴﺲ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﺎﺑﻚ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻤﻔﺎﺗﻴﺢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﺦ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺪ ﺗﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻟﺪﺍﺋﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻘﺼﻴﺮﺓ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺩﺭﺟﺔ ﺍﻟﺤﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﻧﻔﺠﺎﺭ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﺤﺮﻗﻚ ﺃﻭ ﺗﻠﺤﻖ ﺑﻚ ﺍﻟﻀﺮﺭ‪.
PAGE 109
‫ﺗﻨﺒﻴﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ‪ ،‬ﺇﺫﺍ ﻻﺣﻈﺖ ﺍﻧﺒﻌﺎﺙ ﺍﻟﺪﺧﺎﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻀﻮﺿﺎء ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺮﻭﺍﺋﺢ ﺍﻟﻐﺮﻳﺒﺔ ﺣﻮﻟﻬﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻮﻗﻒ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫• ﺗﺠﻨﺐ ﺇﺧﺮﺍﺝ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺑﻴ ٍﺪ ﻋﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻷﻥ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻗﺪ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ ﺍﻧﺪﻻﻉ ﺣﺮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﻳﻌﺮﺽ ﻳﺪﻳﻚ ﻟﻼﺣﺘﺮﺍﻕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺿﺮﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﻟ ًﻐﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻧﺘﺒﻪ ﻟﻠﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺟﻴﺪًﺍ ﻋﻨﺪ ﺣﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‪ .‬ﻓﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﺴﻬﻞ ﺃﻥ ﻳﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺍﻟﺤﺰﺍﻡ ﺑﺄﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻏﺮﻳﺒﺔ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﺎ ﻳﺴﺒﺐ‬ ‫ً‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺘﺮﻙ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻷﻣﺎﻛﻦ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻜﻮﻥ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ُﻋ ً‬ ‫ﺮﺿﺔ ﻟﺪﺭﺟﺎﺕ ﺣﺮﺍﺭﺓ ﻋﺎﻟﻴﺔ ﻟﻠﻐﺎﻳﺔ‪.
PAGE 110
‫• ﻳُﺮﺟﻰ ﺇﻋﺎﺩﺓ ﺗﺪﻭﻳﺮ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﻟﻠﻤﺴﺎﻋﺪﺓ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﺎﻓﻈﺔ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﻛﻮﻛﺒﻨﺎ‪ .‬ﻋﻨﺪ ﺍﻟﺘﺨﻠﺺ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺘﻬﻠﻜﺔ ﺗﻤﺎﻣًﺎ‪ ،‬ﺗﺄﻛﺪ ﻣﻦ ﺗﻐﻄﻴﺔ ﺃﻃﺮﺍﻓﻬﺎ ﻭﺍﻻﻟﺘﺰﺍﻡ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺋﻤًﺎ ﺑﺎﻟﻠﻮﺍﺋﺢ ﻭﺍﻟﻘﻮﺍﻧﻴﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﺤﻠﻴﺔ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﺴﻤﺢ ﻟﻸﻃﻔﺎﻝ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ‪/‬ﺍﻟﺤﻴﻮﺍﻧﺎﺕ ﺍﻷﻟﻴﻔﺔ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻌﺎﻣﻞ ﺃﻭ ﻧﻘﻞ ﺍﻟﺒﻄﺎﺭﻳﺎﺕ )ﺍﻣﻨﻊ ﺍﻟﺴﻠﻮﻙ ﺍﻟﺨﻄﺮ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﻟﻠﻌﻖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻟﻮﺿﻊ ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﻔﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻀﻎ(‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪USB‬‬ ‫• ﺗﻢ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻣﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﺍﻟﻤﺸﻤﻮﻝ ‪ F-2AC‬ﻟﻜﻲ ﻳﺴﺘﺨﺪﻡ ﻣﻊ ﻫﺬﻩ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﻓﻘﻂ‪ .‬ﻻ ﻳﻤﻜﻦ ﺷﺤﻦ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍﺕ ﺍﻷﺧﺮﻯ ﺑﻤﺤﻮﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻴﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻤﺘﺮﺩﺩ ‪ USB‬ﻫﺬﺍ‪.
PAGE 111
‫ﺇﻧﻜﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫• ﻻ ﺗﻘﺪﻡ ‪ Olympus‬ﺃﻳﺔ ﻣﺰﺍﻋﻢ ﺃﻭ ﺿﻤﺎﻧﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺻﺮﻳﺤﺔ ﻛﺎﻧﺖ ﺃﻡ ﺿﻤﻨﻴﺔ‪ ،‬ﺑﺸﺄﻥ ﺃﻭ ﺗﺘﻌﻠﻖ ﺑﺄﻱ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﻯ ﻟﺘﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﻭﻟﻦ ﺗﺘﺤﻤﻞ ﺍﻟﻤﺴﺌﻮﻟﻴﺔ ﺑﺄﻱ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﻣﻦ ﺍﻷﺣﻮﺍﻝ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺿﻤﺎﻥ ﺿﻤﻨﻲ ﺑﺎﻟﺘﺴﻮﻳﻖ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻼءﻣﺔ ﻟﻐﺮﺽ ﻣﺤﺪﺩ ﺃﻭ ﻋﻦ ﺃﻱ ﺃﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﻻﺣﻘﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺮﺿﻴﺔ ﺃﻭ ﻏﻴﺮ ﻣﺒﺎﺷﺮﺓ )ﺑﻤﺎ ﻓﻲ ﺫﻟﻚ ﻭﻻ ﻳﻘﺘﺼﺮ ﻋﻠﻰ‬ ‫ﺍﻷﺿﺮﺍﺭ ﺑﺴﺒﺐ ﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﺃﺭﺑﺎﺡ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻭﺗﻌﻄﻞ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ ﻭﻓﻘﺪﺍﻥ ﻣﻌﻠﻮﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻌﻤﻞ( ﺗﻨﺠﻢ ﻋﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺃﻭ ﻋﺪﻡ ﺇﻣﻜﺎﻧﻴﺔ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻡ ﺗﻠﻚ ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺩ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﺒﺮﺍﻣﺞ ﺃﻭ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺪﺍﺕ‪.
PAGE 112
‫ﺷﺮﻭﻁ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻓﻲ ﺍﻟﺤﺎﻟﺔ ﺑﻌﻴﺪﺓ ﺍﻻﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﺍﻟﺘﻲ ﻳﺜﺒﺖ ﻓﻴﻬﺎ ﺃﻥ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺹ ﺑﻚ ﻣﻌﻴﺐ‪ ،‬ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﻟﺮﻏﻢ ﻣﻦ ﺃﻧﻪ ﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺍﺳﺘﺨﺪﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﺸﻜﻞ ﺻﺤﻴﺢ ً‬ ‫)ﻭﻓﻘﺎ ﻟﺪﻟﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺘﻌﻠﻴﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻤﻜﺘﻮﺑﺔ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﺮﻓﻖ ﻣﻌﻪ(‪ ،‬ﺧﻼﻝ ﻓﺘﺮﺓ ﺍﻟﻀﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻟﻮﻃﻨﻲ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ ﻭﻗﺪ ﺗﻢ ﺷﺮﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﻦ ﻣﻮﺯﻉ ﻣﻌﺘﻤﺪ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪ Olympus‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﻄﻘﺔ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﺍﻟﺨﺎﺻﺔ ﺑﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪ OLYMPUS EUROPA SE & Co. KG‬ﻛﻤﺎ ﻫﻮ ﻣﻨﺼﻮﺹ ﻋﻠﻴﻪ ﻋﻠﻰ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﺍﻟﻮﻳﺐ‪ ،http://www.olympus-europa.com :‬ﺳﻴﺘﻢ ﺇﺻﻼﺣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺃﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺒﺪﺍﻟﻪ ﺑﻨﺎءًﺍ ﻋﻠﻰ ﺍﺧﺘﻴﺎﺭ ‪ Olympus‬ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻣﻘﺎﺑﻞ‪ .
PAGE 113
‫ﺍﻟﻌﻼﻻﻣﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﺘﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ‬ ‫• ‪ Microsoft‬ﻭ ‪ Windows‬ﻋﻼﻣﺘﺎﻥ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺘﺎﻥ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺘﺎﻥ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Microsoft Corporation‬‬ ‫• ‪ Macintosh‬ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Apple Inc.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﺸﻌﺎﺭ ‪ SDXC‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.SD-3C, LLC‬‬ ‫• ﺍﻟﻌﺒﺎﺭﺓ ‪ Eye-Fi‬ﻫﻰ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ ‪.Eye-Fi, Inc.‬‬ ‫• ‪ Wi-Fi‬ﻫﻲ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻞ ﻟﺘﺤﺎﻟﻒ ‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬ ‫• ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Wi-Fi CERTIFIED‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺼﺪﻳﻖ ﻟﺘﺤﺎﻟﻒ‬ ‫‪.Wi-Fi Alliance‬‬ ‫• ﺷﻌﺎﺭ ‪ Apical‬ﻫﻮ ﻋﻼﻣﺔ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﻳﺔ ﻣﺴﺠﻠﺔ ﻟﺸﺮﻛﺔ‬ ‫‪.
PAGE 114
‫ﺍﻟﻤﻮﺍﺻﻔﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﻉ ﺍﻟﻤﻨﺘﺞ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻛﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ ﺭﻗﻤﻴﺔ )ﻟﻠﺘﺼﻮﻳﺮ ﻭﺍﻟﻌﺮﺽ(‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﺍﻟﺘﺴﺠﻴﻞ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ‪JPEG ،‬‬ ‫)ﺑﺎﻟﺘﻮﺍﻓﻖ ﻣﻊ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺗﺼﻤﻴﻢ ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﻣﻠﻔﺎﺕ ﺍﻟﻜﺎﻣﻴﺮﺍ )‪((DCF‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻤﻌﺎﻳﻴﺮ ﺍﻟﻤﻌﻤﻮﻝ ﺑﻬﺎ‬ ‫‪ :‬ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‪ Exif 2.3‬ﻭﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ﺗﺮﺗﻴﺐ ﺍﻟﻄﺒﺎﻋﺔ ﺍﻟﺮﻗﻤﻲ )‪ (DPOF‬ﻭﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ PRINT Image Matching III‬ﻭﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪PictBridge‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺕ ﻣﻊ ﺍﻟﺼﻮﺭ ﺍﻟﺜﺎﺑﺘﺔ ‪ :‬ﺗﻨﺴﻴﻖ ‪Wave‬‬ ‫ﻓﻴﻠﻢ ﺳﻴﻨﻤﺎﺋﻲ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﺬﺍﻛﺮﺓ‬ ‫‪HS120fps) AVI Motion JPEG ،MOV H.
PAGE 115
‫ﻣﻌﻴﺎﺭ ‪Wi-Fi‬‬ ‫‪IEEE802.11b/g/n :‬‬ ‫‪GPS‬‬ ‫ﺗﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﻻﺳﺘﻘﺒﺎﻝ‬ ‫‪ 1575.42 :‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ )‪ /GPS‬ﻧﻈﺎﻡ ﺍﻷﻗﻤﺎﺭ ﺍﻟﺼﻨﺎﻋﻴﺔ‬ ‫‪(Quasi-Zenith‬‬ ‫‪ 1598.0625‬ﻣﻴﺠﺎ ﻫﺮﺗﺰ ﺇﻟﻰ ‪ 1605.
PAGE 116
‫ﺗﺎﺭﻳﺦ ﺍﻹﺻﺪﺍﺭ ‪2015.02.